2001-11-30 18:17:24 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\chapter{Graphical User Interfaces with Tk \label{tkinter}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{GUI}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Graphical User Interface}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Tkinter}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Tk}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk/Tcl has long been an integral part of Python.  It provides a robust
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								and platform independent windowing toolkit, that is available to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Python programmers using the \refmodule{Tkinter} module, and its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								extension, the \refmodule{Tix} module.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \refmodule{Tkinter} module is a thin object--oriented layer on top of
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tcl/Tk. To use \refmodule{Tkinter}, you don't need to write Tcl code,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								but you will need to consult the Tk documentation, and occasionally
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the Tcl documentation.  \refmodule{Tkinter} is a set of wrappers that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								implement the Tk widgets as Python classes.  In addition, the internal
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								module \module{\_tkinter} provides a threadsafe mechanism which allows
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Python and Tcl to interact.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk is not the only GUI for Python, but is however the most commonly
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								used one; see section~\ref{other-gui-modules}, ``Other User Interface
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Modules and Packages,'' for more information on other GUI toolkits for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Other sections I have in mind are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Tkinter internals
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Freezing Tkinter applications
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\localmoduletable
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{\module{Tkinter} ---
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         Python interface to Tcl/Tk}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\declaremodule{standard}{Tkinter}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\modulesynopsis{Interface to Tcl/Tk for graphical user interfaces}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\moduleauthor{Guido van Rossum}{guido@Python.org}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \module{Tkinter} module (``Tk interface'') is the standard Python
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-09-10 21:59:17 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								interface to the Tk GUI toolkit.  Both Tk and \module{Tkinter} are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								available on most \UNIX{} platforms, as well as on Windows and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Macintosh systems.  (Tk itself is not part of Python; it is maintained
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								at ActiveState.)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{seealso}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.python.org/topics/tkinter/]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Python Tkinter Resources}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {The Python Tkinter Topic Guide provides a great
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            deal of information on using Tk from Python and links to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            other sources of information on Tk.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.pythonware.com/library/an-introduction-to-tkinter.htm]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {An Introduction to Tkinter}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Fredrik Lundh's on-line reference material.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.nmt.edu/tcc/help/pubs/lang.html]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Tkinter reference: a GUI for Python}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {On-line reference material.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://jtkinter.sourceforge.net]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Tkinter for JPython}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {The Jython interface to Tkinter.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.amazon.com/exec/obidos/ASIN/1884777813]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {Python and Tkinter Programming}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         {The book by John Grayson (ISBN 1-884777-81-3).}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{seealso}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Tkinter Modules}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Most of the time, the \refmodule{Tkinter} module is all you really
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								need, but a number of additional modules are available as well.  The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk interface is located in a binary module named \module{_tkinter}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This module contains the low-level interface to Tk, and should never
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								be used directly by application programmers. It is usually a shared
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								library (or DLL), but might in some cases be statically linked with
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the Python interpreter.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								In addition to the Tk interface module, \refmodule{Tkinter} includes a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								number of Python modules. The two most important modules are the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\refmodule{Tkinter} module itself, and a module called
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\module{Tkconstants}. The former automatically imports the latter, so
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to use Tkinter, all you need to do is to import one module:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								import Tkinter
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Or, more often:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								from Tkinter import *
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2004-02-18 05:59:53 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{Tk}{screenName=None, baseName=None, className='Tk', useTk=1}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \class{Tk} class is instantiated without arguments.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This creates a toplevel widget of Tk which usually is the main window
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								of an appliation. Each instance has its own associated Tcl interpreter.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% FIXME: The following keyword arguments are currently recognized:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2004-02-28 15:19:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\versionchanged[The \var{useTk} parameter was added]{2.4}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2004-02-18 05:59:53 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{funcdesc}{Tcl}{screenName=None, baseName=None, className='Tk', useTk=0}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \function{Tcl} function is a factory function which creates an object
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								much like that created by the \class{Tk} class, except that it does not
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								initialize the Tk subsystem.  This is most often useful when driving the Tcl
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								interpreter in an environment where one doesn't want to create extraneous
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								toplevel windows, or where one cannot (i.e. Unix/Linux systems without an X
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								server).  An object created by the \function{Tcl} object can have a Toplevel
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								window created (and the Tk subsystem initialized) by calling its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\method{loadtk} method.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2004-02-28 15:19:33 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\versionadded{2.4}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2004-02-18 05:59:53 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{funcdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Other modules that provide Tk support include:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \declaremodule{standard}{Tkconstants}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \modulesynopsis{Constants used by Tkinter}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% FIXME 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-03 21:18:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\refmodule{ScrolledText}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Text widget with a vertical scroll bar built in.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\module{tkColorChooser}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Dialog to let the user choose a color.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\module{tkCommonDialog}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 19:24:49 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Base class for the dialogs defined in the other modules listed here.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\module{tkFileDialog}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Common dialogs to allow the user to specify a file to open or save.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\module{tkFont}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Utilities to help work with fonts.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\module{tkMessageBox}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Access to standard Tk dialog boxes.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\module{tkSimpleDialog}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Basic dialogs and convenience functions.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\module{Tkdnd}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Drag-and-drop support for \refmodule{Tkinter}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This is experimental and should become deprecated when it is replaced 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								with the Tk DND.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\refmodule{turtle}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Turtle graphics in a Tk window.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Tkinter Life Preserver}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\sectionauthor{Matt Conway}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Converted to LaTeX by Mike Clarkson.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This section is not designed to be an exhaustive tutorial on either
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk or Tkinter.  Rather, it is intended as a stop gap, providing some
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								introductory orientation on the system.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Credits:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Tkinter was written by Steen Lumholt and Guido van Rossum.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Tk was written by John Ousterhout while at Berkeley.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   This Life Preserver was written by Matt Conway at
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the University of Virginia.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   The html rendering, and some liberal editing, was
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								produced from a FrameMaker version by Ken Manheimer.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Fredrik Lundh elaborated and revised the class interface descriptions,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to get them current with Tk 4.2.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item  Mike Clarkson converted the documentation to \LaTeX, and compiled the 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								User Interface chapter of the reference manual.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{How To Use This Section}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This section is designed in two parts: the first half (roughly) covers
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								background material, while the second half can be taken to the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								keyboard as a handy reference.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								When trying to answer questions of the form ``how do I do blah'', it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is often best to find out how to do``blah'' in straight Tk, and then
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								convert this back into the corresponding \refmodule{Tkinter} call.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Python programmers can often guess at the correct Python command by
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								looking at the Tk documentation. This means that in order to use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tkinter, you will have to know a little bit about Tk. This document
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								can't fulfill that role, so the best we can do is point you to the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								best documentation that exists. Here are some hints:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   The authors strongly suggest getting a copy of the Tk man
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								pages. Specifically, the man pages in the \code{mann} directory are most
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								useful. The \code{man3} man pages describe the C interface to the Tk
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								library and thus are not especially helpful for script writers.  
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Addison-Wesley publishes a book called \citetitle{Tcl and the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk Toolkit} by John Ousterhout (ISBN 0-201-63337-X) which is a good
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								introduction to Tcl and Tk for the novice.  The book is not
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								exhaustive, and for many details it defers to the man pages. 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \file{Tkinter.py} is a last resort for most, but can be a good
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								place to go when nothing else makes sense.  
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{seealso}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://tcl.activestate.com/]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {ActiveState Tcl Home Page}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {The Tk/Tcl development is largely taking place at
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         ActiveState.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.amazon.com/exec/obidos/ASIN/020163337X]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {Tcl and the Tk Toolkit}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {The book by John Ousterhout, the inventor of Tcl .}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.amazon.com/exec/obidos/ASIN/0130220280]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {Practical Programming in Tcl and Tk}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {Brent Welch's encyclopedic book.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{seealso}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{A Simple Hello World Program} % HelloWorld.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%begin{latexonly}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\begin{figure}[hbtp]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\centerline{\epsfig{file=HelloWorld.gif,width=.9\textwidth}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\vspace{.5cm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\caption{HelloWorld gadget image}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\end{figure}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%See also the hello-world \ulink{notes}{classes/HelloWorld-notes.html} and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\ulink{summary}{classes/HelloWorld-summary.html}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%end{latexonly}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2003-05-20 15:21:08 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								from Tkinter import *
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								class Application(Frame):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def say_hi(self):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        print "hi there, everyone!"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def createWidgets(self):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.QUIT = Button(self)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.QUIT["text"] = "QUIT"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.QUIT["fg"]   = "red"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.QUIT["command"] =  self.quit
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.QUIT.pack({"side": "left"})
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.hi_there = Button(self)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.hi_there["text"] = "Hello",
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.hi_there["command"] = self.say_hi
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.hi_there.pack({"side": "left"})
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def __init__(self, master=None):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Frame.__init__(self, master)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.pack()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.createWidgets()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								app = Application()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								app.mainloop()
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-03 06:12:23 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{A (Very) Quick Look at Tcl/Tk} % BriefTclTk.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The class hierarchy looks complicated, but in actual practice,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								application programmers almost always refer to the classes at the very
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bottom of the hierarchy. 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Notes:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   These classes are provided for the purposes of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								organizing certain functions under one namespace. They aren't meant to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								be instantiated independently.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-03 06:12:23 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item    The \class{Tk} class is meant to be instantiated only once in
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								an application. Application programmers need not instantiate one
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								explicitly, the system creates one whenever any of the other classes
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								are instantiated.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-03 06:12:23 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item    The \class{Widget} class is not meant to be instantiated, it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is meant only for subclassing to make ``real'' widgets (in \Cpp, this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is called an `abstract class').
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								To make use of this reference material, there will be times when you
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								will need to know how to read short passages of Tk and how to identify
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the various parts of a Tk command.  
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(See section~\ref{tkinter-basic-mapping} for the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\refmodule{Tkinter} equivalents of what's below.)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk scripts are Tcl programs.  Like all Tcl programs, Tk scripts are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								just lists of tokens separated by spaces.  A Tk widget is just its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\emph{class}, the \emph{options} that help configure it, and the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\emph{actions} that make it do useful things. 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								To make a widget in Tk, the command is always of the form: 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                classCommand newPathname options
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\var{classCommand}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								denotes which kind of widget to make (a button, a label, a menu...)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\var{newPathname}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is the new name for this widget.  All names in Tk must be unique.  To
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								help enforce this, widgets in Tk are named with \emph{pathnames}, just
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								like files in a file system.  The top level widget, the \emph{root},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is called \code{.} (period) and children are delimited by more
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								periods.  For example, \code{.myApp.controlPanel.okButton} might be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the name of a widget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\var{options} ]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								configure the widget's appearance and in some cases, its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								behavior.  The options come in the form of a list of flags and values.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Flags are proceeded by a `-', like unix shell command flags, and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								values are put in quotes if they are more than one word.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								For example: 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    button   .fred   -fg red -text "hi there"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								       ^       ^     \_____________________/
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								       |       |                |
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								     class    new            options
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    command  widget  (-opt val -opt val ...)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim} 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Once created, the pathname to the widget becomes a new command.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								new \var{widget command} is the programmer's handle for getting the new
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget to perform some \var{action}.  In C, you'd express this as
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								someAction(fred, someOptions), in \Cpp, you would express this as
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								fred.someAction(someOptions), and in Tk, you say: 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    .fred someAction someOptions 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim} 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Note that the object name, \code{.fred}, starts with a dot.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								As you'd expect, the legal values for \var{someAction} will depend on
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the widget's class: \code{.fred disable} works if fred is a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								button (fred gets greyed out), but does not work if fred is a label
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(disabling of labels is not supported in Tk). 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The legal values of \var{someOptions} is action dependent.  Some
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								actions, like \code{disable}, require no arguments, others, like
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								a text-entry box's \code{delete} command, would need arguments
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to specify what range of text to delete.  
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Mapping Basic Tk into Tkinter
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            \label{tkinter-basic-mapping}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Class commands in Tk correspond to class constructors in Tkinter.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    button .fred                =====>  fred = Button()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The master of an object is implicit in the new name given to it at
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								creation time.  In Tkinter, masters are specified explicitly.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    button .panel.fred          =====>  fred = Button(panel)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The configuration options in Tk are given in lists of hyphened tags
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								followed by values.  In Tkinter, options are specified as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								keyword-arguments in the instance constructor, and keyword-args for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								configure calls or as instance indices, in dictionary style, for
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								established instances.  See section~\ref{tkinter-setting-options} on
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								setting options.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    button .fred -fg red        =====>  fred = Button(panel, fg = "red")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    .fred configure -fg red     =====>  fred["fg"] = red
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                OR ==>  fred.config(fg = "red")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								In Tk, to perform an action on a widget, use the widget name as a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								command, and follow it with an action name, possibly with arguments
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(options).  In Tkinter, you call methods on the class instance to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								invoke actions on the widget.  The actions (methods) that a given
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget can perform are listed in the Tkinter.py module.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    .fred invoke                =====>  fred.invoke()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								To give a widget to the packer (geometry manager), you call pack with
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								optional arguments.  In Tkinter, the Pack class holds all this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								functionality, and the various forms of the pack command are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								implemented as methods.  All widgets in \refmodule{Tkinter} are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								subclassed from the Packer, and so inherit all the packing
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								methods. See the \refmodule{Tix} module documentation for additional
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								information on the Form geometry manager.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    pack .fred -side left       =====>  fred.pack(side = "left")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{How Tk and Tkinter are Related} % Relationship.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\note{This was derived from a graphical image; the image will be used
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								      more directly in a subsequent version of this document.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								From the top down:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{Your App Here (Python)}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								A Python application makes a \refmodule{Tkinter} call.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{Tkinter (Python Module)}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This call (say, for example, creating a button widget), is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								implemented in the \emph{Tkinter} module, which is written in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Python.  This Python function will parse the commands and the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								arguments and convert them into a form that makes them look as if they
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								had come from a Tk script instead of a Python script.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{tkinter (C)}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								These commands and their arguments will be passed to a C function
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								in the \emph{tkinter} - note the lowercase - extension module.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{Tk Widgets} (C and Tcl)]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This C function is able to make calls into other C modules,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								including the C functions that make up the Tk library.  Tk is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								implemented in C and some Tcl.  The Tcl part of the Tk widgets is used
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to bind certain default behaviors to widgets, and is executed once at
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the point where the Python \refmodule{Tkinter} module is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								imported. (The user never sees this stage).
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{Tk (C)}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The Tk part of the Tk Widgets implement the final mapping to ...
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{Xlib (C)}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the Xlib library to draw graphics on the screen.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Handy Reference}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Setting Options
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								               \label{tkinter-setting-options}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Options control things like the color and border width of a widget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Options can be set in three ways:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[At object creation time, using keyword arguments]:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								fred = Button(self, fg = "red", bg = "blue")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[After object creation, treating the option name like a dictionary index]:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								fred["fg"] = "red"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								fred["bg"] = "blue"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Use the config() method to update multiple attrs subesequent to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								object creation]:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								fred.config(fg = "red", bg = "blue")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								For a complete explanation of a given option and its behavior, see the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk man pages for the widget in question.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Note that the man pages list "STANDARD OPTIONS" and "WIDGET SPECIFIC
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								OPTIONS" for each widget.  The former is a list of options that are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								common to many widgets, the latter are the options that are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								ideosyncratic to that particular widget.  The Standard Options are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								documented on the \manpage{options}{3} man page.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								No distinction between standard and widget-specific options is made in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								this document.  Some options don't apply to some kinds of widgets.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Whether a given widget responds to a particular option depends on the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								class of the widget; buttons have a \code{command} option, labels do not. 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The options supported by a given widget are listed in that widget's
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								man page, or can be queried at runtime by calling the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-07-08 14:42:22 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\method{config()} method without arguments, or by calling the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\method{keys()} method on that widget.  The return value of these
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								calls is a dictionary whose key is the name of the option as a string
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(for example, \code{'relief'}) and whose values are 5-tuples.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Some options, like \code{bg} are synonyms for common options with long
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								names (\code{bg} is shorthand for "background"). Passing the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{config()} method the name of a shorthand option will return a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								2-tuple, not 5-tuple. The 2-tuple passed back will contain the name of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the synonym and the ``real'' option (such as \code{('bg',
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								'background')}).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{tableiii}{c|l|l}{textrm}{Index}{Meaning}{Example}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineiii{0}{option name}                       {\code{'relief'}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineiii{1}{option name for database lookup}   {\code{'relief'}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineiii{2}{option class for database lookup}  {\code{'Relief'}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineiii{3}{default value}                     {\code{'raised'}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  \lineiii{4}{current value}                     {\code{'groove'}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{tableiii}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Example:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								>>> print fred.config()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{'relief' : ('relief', 'relief', 'Relief', 'raised', 'groove')}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Of course, the dictionary printed will include all the options
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								available and their values.  This is meant only as an example.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{The Packer} % Packer.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{packing (widgets)}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The packer is one of Tk's geometry-management mechanisms.  See also
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\citetitle[classes/ClassPacker.html]{the Packer class interface}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Geometry managers are used to specify the relative positioning of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								positioning of widgets within their container - their mutual
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\emph{master}.  In contrast to the more cumbersome \emph{placer}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(which is used less commonly, and we do not cover here), the packer
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								takes qualitative relationship specification - \emph{above}, \emph{to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the left of}, \emph{filling}, etc - and works everything out to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								determine the exact placement coordinates for you. 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The size of any \emph{master} widget is determined by the size of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the "slave widgets" inside.  The packer is used to control where slave
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widgets appear inside the master into which they are packed.  You can
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								pack widgets into frames, and frames into other frames, in order to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								achieve the kind of layout you desire.  Additionally, the arrangement
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2004-09-11 16:50:06 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is dynamically adjusted to accommodate incremental changes to the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								configuration, once it is packed.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Note that widgets do not appear until they have had their geometry
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								specified with a geometry manager.  It's a common early mistake to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								leave out the geometry specification, and then be surprised when the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget is created but nothing appears.  A widget will appear only
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								after it has had, for example, the packer's \method{pack()} method
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								applied to it.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The pack() method can be called with keyword-option/value pairs that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								control where the widget is to appear within its container, and how it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is to behave when the main application window is resized.  Here are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								some examples:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    fred.pack()                     # defaults to side = "top"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    fred.pack(side = "left")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    fred.pack(expand = 1)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Packer Options}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								For more extensive information on the packer and the options that it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								can take, see the man pages and page 183 of John Ousterhout's book.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{anchor }]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Anchor type.  Denotes where the packer is to place each slave in its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								parcel.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{expand}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Boolean, \code{0} or \code{1}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{fill}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Legal values: \code{'x'}, \code{'y'}, \code{'both'}, \code{'none'}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{ipadx} and \b{ipady}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								A distance - designating internal padding on each side of the slave
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{padx} and \b{pady}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								A distance - designating external padding on each side of the slave
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{side}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Legal values are: \code{'left'}, \code{'right'}, \code{'top'},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{'bottom'}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Coupling Widget Variables} % VarCouplings.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The current-value setting of some widgets (like text entry widgets)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								can be connected directly to application variables by using special
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								options.  These options are \code{variable}, \code{textvariable},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{onvalue}, \code{offvalue}, and \code{value}.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								connection works both ways: if the variable changes for any reason,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the widget it's connected to will be updated to reflect the new value. 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Unfortunately, in the current implementation of \refmodule{Tkinter} it is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								not possible to hand over an arbitrary Python variable to a widget
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								through a \code{variable} or \code{textvariable} option.  The only
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								kinds of variables for which this works are variables that are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								subclassed from a class called Variable, defined in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\refmodule{Tkinter} module.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								There are many useful subclasses of Variable already defined:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\class{StringVar}, \class{IntVar}, \class{DoubleVar}, and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\class{BooleanVar}.  To read the current value of such a variable,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								call the \method{get()} method on
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								it, and to change its value you call the \method{set()} method.  If
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								you follow this protocol, the widget will always track the value of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the variable, with no further intervention on your part.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								For example: 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								class App(Frame):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def __init__(self, master=None):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Frame.__init__(self, master)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.pack()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.entrythingy = Entry()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.entrythingy.pack()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.button.pack()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        # here is the application variable
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.contents = StringVar()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        # set it to some value
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.contents.set("this is a variable")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        # tell the entry widget to watch this variable
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.entrythingy["textvariable"] = self.contents
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        # and here we get a callback when the user hits return.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        # we will have the program print out the value of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        # application variable when the user hits return
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.entrythingy.bind('<Key-Return>',
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                              self.print_contents)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def print_contents(self, event):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        print "hi. contents of entry is now ---->", \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								              self.contents.get()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{The Window Manager} % WindowMgr.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{window manager (widgets)}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								In Tk, there is a utility command, \code{wm}, for interacting with the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								window manager.  Options to the \code{wm} command allow you to control
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								things like titles, placement, icon bitmaps, and the like.  In
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\refmodule{Tkinter}, these commands have been implemented as methods
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								on the \class{Wm} class.  Toplevel widgets are subclassed from the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\class{Wm} class, and so can call the \class{Wm} methods directly.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%See also \citetitle[classes/ClassWm.html]{the Wm class interface}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								To get at the toplevel window that contains a given widget, you can
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								often just refer to the widget's master.  Of course if the widget has
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								been packed inside of a frame, the master won't represent a toplevel
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								window.  To get at the toplevel window that contains an arbitrary
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget, you can call the \method{_root()} method.  This
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								method begins with an underscore to denote the fact that this function
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is part of the implementation, and not an interface to Tk functionality.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Here are some examples of typical usage:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								import Tkinter
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								class App(Frame):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def __init__(self, master=None):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Frame.__init__(self, master)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        self.pack()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								# create the application
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								myapp = App()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								# here are method calls to the window manager class
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								myapp.master.title("My Do-Nothing Application")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								myapp.master.maxsize(1000, 400)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								# start the program
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								myapp.mainloop()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Tk Option Data Types} % OptionTypes.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Tk Option Data Types}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[anchor]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Legal values are points of the compass: \code{"n"},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{"ne"}, \code{"e"}, \code{"se"}, \code{"s"},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{"sw"}, \code{"w"}, \code{"nw"}, and also
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{"center"}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[bitmap]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								There are eight built-in, named bitmaps: \code{'error'}, \code{'gray25'},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{'gray50'}, \code{'hourglass'}, \code{'info'}, \code{'questhead'},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{'question'}, \code{'warning'}.  To specify an X bitmap
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								filename, give the full path to the file, preceded with an \code{@},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								as in \code{"@/usr/contrib/bitmap/gumby.bit"}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[boolean]
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-11-03 13:13:20 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								You can pass integers 0 or 1 or the strings \code{"yes"} or \code{"no"} .
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[callback]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This is any Python function that takes no arguments.  For example: 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def print_it():
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            print "hi there"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    fred["command"] = print_it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[color]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Colors can be given as the names of X colors in the rgb.txt file,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								or as strings representing RGB values in 4 bit: \code{"\#RGB"}, 8
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bit: \code{"\#RRGGBB"}, 12 bit" \code{"\#RRRGGGBBB"}, or 16 bit
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{"\#RRRRGGGGBBBB"} ranges, where R,G,B here represent any
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								legal hex digit.  See page 160 of Ousterhout's book for details.  
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[cursor]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The standard X cursor names from \file{cursorfont.h} can be used,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								without the \code{XC_} prefix.  For example to get a hand cursor
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(\constant{XC_hand2}), use the string \code{"hand2"}.  You can also
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								specify a bitmap and mask file of your own.  See page 179 of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Ousterhout's book.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[distance]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Screen distances can be specified in either pixels or absolute
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								distances.  Pixels are given as numbers and absolute distances as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								strings, with the trailing character denoting units: \code{c}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								for centimeters, \code{i} for inches, \code{m} for millimeters,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{p} for printer's points.  For example, 3.5 inches is expressed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								as \code{"3.5i"}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[font]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk uses a list font name format, such as \code{\{courier 10 bold\}}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Font sizes with positive numbers are measured in points;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								sizes with negative numbers are measured in pixels.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[geometry]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This is a string of the form \samp{\var{width}x\var{height}}, where
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								width and height are measured in pixels for most widgets (in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								characters for widgets displaying text).  For example:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{fred["geometry"] = "200x100"}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[justify]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Legal values are the strings: \code{"left"},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{"center"}, \code{"right"}, and \code{"fill"}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[region]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This is a string with four space-delimited elements, each of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								which is a legal distance (see above).  For example: \code{"2 3 4
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								5"} and \code{"3i 2i 4.5i 2i"} and \code{"3c 2c 4c 10.43c"} 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								are all legal regions.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[relief]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Determines what the border style of a widget will be.  Legal
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								values are: \code{"raised"}, \code{"sunken"},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{"flat"}, \code{"groove"}, and \code{"ridge"}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[scrollcommand]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								This is almost always the \method{set()} method of some scrollbar
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget, but can be any widget method that takes a single argument.  
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Refer to the file \file{Demo/tkinter/matt/canvas-with-scrollbars.py}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								in the Python source distribution for an example.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[wrap:]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Must be one of: \code{"none"}, \code{"char"}, or \code{"word"}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Bindings and Events} % Bindings.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{bind (widgets)}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{events (widgets)}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The bind method from the widget command allows you to watch for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								certain events and to have a callback function trigger when that event
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								type occurs.  The form of the bind method is:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def bind(self, sequence, func, add=''):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								where:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[sequence]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is a string that denotes the target kind of event.  (See the bind
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								man page and page 201 of John Ousterhout's book for details).
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[func]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is a Python function, taking one argument, to be invoked when the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								event occurs.  An Event instance will be passed as the argument.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(Functions deployed this way are commonly known as \var{callbacks}.)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[add]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is optional, either \samp{} or \samp{+}.  Passing an empty string
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								denotes that this binding is to replace any other bindings that this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								event is associated with.  Preceeding with a \samp{+} means that this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								function is to be added to the list of functions bound to this event type.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								For example:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    def turnRed(self, event):
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        event.widget["activeforeground"] = "red"
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    self.button.bind("<Enter>", self.turnRed)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Notice how the widget field of the event is being accesed in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\method{turnRed()} callback.  This field contains the widget that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								caught the X event.  The following table lists the other event fields
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								you can access, and how they are denoted in Tk, which can be useful
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								when referring to the Tk man pages.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk      Tkinter Event Field             Tk      Tkinter Event Field 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								--      -------------------             --      -------------------
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%f      focus                           %A      char
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%h      height                          %E      send_event
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%k      keycode                         %K      keysym
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%s      state                           %N      keysym_num
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%t      time                            %T      type
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%w      width                           %W      widget
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%x      x                               %X      x_root
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%y      y                               %Y      y_root
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{The index Parameter} % Index.html
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								A number of widgets require``index'' parameters to be passed.  These
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								are used to point at a specific place in a Text widget, or to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								particular characters in an Entry widget, or to particular menu items
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								in a Menu widget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{Entry widget indexes (index, view index, etc.)}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Entry widgets have options that refer to character positions in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								text being displayed.  You can use these \refmodule{Tkinter} functions
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to access these special points in text widgets:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[AtEnd()]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								refers to the last position in the text
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[AtInsert()]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								refers to the point where the text cursor is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[AtSelFirst()]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								indicates the beginning point of the selected text
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[AtSelLast()]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								denotes the last point of the selected text and finally
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[At(x\optional{, y})]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								refers to the character at pixel location \var{x}, \var{y} (with
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\var{y} not used in the case of a text entry widget, which contains a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								single line of text).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{Text widget indexes}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The index notation for Text widgets is very rich and is best described
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								in the Tk man pages.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[\b{Menu indexes (menu.invoke(), menu.entryconfig(), etc.)}]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Some options and methods for menus manipulate specific menu entries.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Anytime a menu index is needed for an option or a parameter, you may
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								pass in: 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   an integer which refers to the numeric position of the entry in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the widget, counted from the top, starting with 0; 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   the string \code{'active'}, which refers to the menu position that is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								currently under the cursor;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   the string \code{"last"} which refers to the last menu
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								item;  
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   An integer preceded by \code{@}, as in \code{@6}, where the integer is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								interpreted as a y pixel coordinate in the menu's coordinate system;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   the string \code{"none"}, which indicates no menu entry at all, most
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								often used with menu.activate() to deactivate all entries, and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								finally,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   a text string that is pattern matched against the label of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								menu entry, as scanned from the top of the menu to the bottom.  Note
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								that this index type is considered after all the others, which means
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								that matches for menu items labelled \code{last}, \code{active}, or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{none} may be interpreted as the above literals, instead.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-11-05 22:11:50 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Images}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Bitmap/Pixelmap images can be created through the subclasses of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\class{Tkinter.Image}:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item  \class{BitmapImage} can be used for X11 bitmap data.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item  \class{PhotoImage} can be used for GIF and PPM/PGM color bitmaps.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Either type of image is created through either the \code{file} or the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{data} option (other options are available as well).
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-11-05 22:46:39 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The image object can then be used wherever an \code{image} option is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-11-05 22:11:50 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								supported by some widget (e.g. labels, buttons, menus). In these
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								cases, Tk will not keep a reference to the image. When the last Python
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								reference to the image object is deleted, the image data is deleted as
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-11-05 22:46:39 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								well, and Tk will display an empty box wherever the image was used.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{\module{Tix} ---
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         Extension widgets for Tk}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\declaremodule{standard}{Tix}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\modulesynopsis{Tk Extension Widgets for Tkinter}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\sectionauthor{Mike Clarkson}{mikeclarkson@users.sourceforge.net}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Tix}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \module{Tix} (Tk Interface Extension) module provides an
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								additional rich set of widgets. Although the standard Tk library has
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								many useful widgets, they are far from complete. The \module{Tix}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								library provides most of the commonly needed widgets that are missing
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								from standard Tk: \class{HList}, \class{ComboBox}, \class{Control}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(a.k.a. SpinBox) and an assortment of scrollable widgets. \module{Tix}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								also includes many more widgets that are generally useful in a wide
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								range of applications: \class{NoteBook}, \class{FileEntry},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\class{PanedWindow}, etc; there are more than 40 of them.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								With all these new widgets, you can introduce new interaction
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								techniques into applications, creating more useful and more intuitive
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								user interfaces. You can design your application by choosing the most
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								appropriate widgets to match the special needs of your application and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								users. 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{seealso}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://tix.sourceforge.net/]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {Tix Homepage}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-13 04:25:37 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {The home page for \module{Tix}.  This includes links to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         additional documentation and downloads.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {Tix Man Pages}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {On-line version of the man pages and reference material.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/docs/tix-book/tix.book.html]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {Tix Programming Guide}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {On-line version of the programmer's reference material.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://tix.sourceforge.net/Tide/]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {Tix Development Applications}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        {Tix applications for development of Tix and Tkinter programs.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         Tide applications work under Tk or Tkinter, and include
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         \program{TixInspect}, an inspector to remotely modify and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         debug Tix/Tk/Tkinter applications.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{seealso}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Using Tix}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{Tix}{screenName\optional{, baseName\optional{, className}}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Toplevel widget of Tix which represents mostly the main window
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    of an application. It has an associated Tcl interpreter.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Classes in the \refmodule{Tix} module subclasses the classes in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\refmodule{Tkinter} module. The former imports the latter, so to use
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\refmodule{Tix} with Tkinter, all you need to do is to import one
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								module. In general, you can just import \refmodule{Tix}, and replace
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the toplevel call to \class{Tkinter.Tk} with \class{Tix.Tk}:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								import Tix
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								from Tkconstants import *
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								root = Tix.Tk()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								To use \refmodule{Tix}, you must have the \refmodule{Tix} widgets installed,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								usually alongside your installation of the Tk widgets.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								To test your installation, try the following:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								import Tix
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								root = Tix.Tk()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								root.tk.eval('package require Tix')
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								If this fails, you have a Tk installation problem which must be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								resolved before proceeding. Use the environment variable \envvar{TIX_LIBRARY}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to point to the installed \refmodule{Tix} library directory, and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								make sure you have the dynamic object library (\file{tix8183.dll} or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\file{libtix8183.so}) in  the same directory that contains your Tk
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								dynamic object library (\file{tk8183.dll} or \file{libtk8183.so}). The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								directory with the dynamic object library should also have a file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								called \file{pkgIndex.tcl} (case sensitive), which contains the line:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								package ifneeded Tix 8.1 [list load "[file join $dir tix8183.dll]" Tix]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim} % $ <-- bow to font-lock
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Tix Widgets}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\ulink{Tix}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/TixIntro.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								introduces over 40 widget classes to the \refmodule{Tkinter} 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								repertoire.  There is a demo of all the \refmodule{Tix} widgets in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\file{Demo/tix} directory of the standard distribution.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% The Python sample code is still being added to Python, hence commented out
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Basic Widgets}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{Balloon}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								A \ulink{Balloon}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixBalloon.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								that pops up over a widget to provide help.  When the user moves the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								cursor inside a widget to which a Balloon widget has been bound, a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								small pop-up window with a descriptive message will be shown on the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								screen.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Balloon}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/Balloon.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{ButtonBox}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{ButtonBox}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixButtonBox.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget creates a box of buttons, such as is commonly used for \code{Ok
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Cancel}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ButtonBox}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/BtnBox.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{ComboBox}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{ComboBox}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixComboBox.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget is similar to the combo box control in MS Windows. The user can
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								select a choice by either typing in the entry subwdget or selecting
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								from the listbox subwidget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ComboBox}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/ComboBox.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{Control}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{Control}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixControl.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget is also known as the \class{SpinBox} widget. The user can
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								adjust the value by pressing the two arrow buttons or by entering the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								value directly into the entry. The new value will be checked against
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the user-defined upper and lower limits.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Control}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/Control.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{LabelEntry}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{LabelEntry}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixLabelEntry.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget packages an entry widget and a label into one mega widget. It
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								can be used be used to simplify the creation of ``entry-form'' type of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								interface.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{LabelEntry}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/LabEntry.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{LabelFrame}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{LabelFrame}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixLabelFrame.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget packages a frame widget and a label into one mega widget.  To
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								create widgets inside a LabelFrame widget, one creates the new widgets
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								relative to the \member{frame} subwidget and manage them inside the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\member{frame} subwidget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{LabelFrame}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/LabFrame.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{Meter}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{Meter}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixMeter.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget can be used to show the progress of a background job which may
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								take a long time to execute.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Meter}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/Meter.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{OptionMenu}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{OptionMenu}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixOptionMenu.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								creates a menu button of options.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{OptionMenu}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/OptMenu.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{PopupMenu}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{PopupMenu}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixPopupMenu.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget can be used as a replacement of the \code{tk_popup}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								command. The advantage of the \refmodule{Tix} \class{PopupMenu} widget
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is it requires less application code to manipulate.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{PopupMenu}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/PopMenu.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{Select}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{Select}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixSelect.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget is a container of button subwidgets. It can be used to provide
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								radio-box or check-box style of selection options for the user.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Select}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/Select.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{StdButtonBox}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{StdButtonBox}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixStdButtonBox.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget is a group of standard buttons for Motif-like dialog boxes.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{StdButtonBox}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/StdBBox.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{File Selectors}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{DirList}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{DirList}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixDirList.htm} widget
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								displays a list view of a directory, its previous directories and its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								sub-directories. The user can choose one of the directories displayed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								in the list or change to another directory.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{DirList}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/DirList.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{DirTree}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{DirTree}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixDirTree.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget displays a tree view of a directory, its previous directories
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								and its sub-directories. The user can choose one of the directories
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								displayed in the list or change to another directory.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{DirTree}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/DirTree.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{DirSelectDialog}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{DirSelectDialog}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixDirSelectDialog.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget presents the directories in the file system in a dialog
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								window.  The user can use this dialog window to navigate through the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								file system to select the desired directory.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{DirSelectDialog}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/DirDlg.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{DirSelectBox}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \class{DirSelectBox} is similar
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to the standard Motif(TM) directory-selection box. It is generally used for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the user to choose a directory. DirSelectBox stores the directories mostly
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								recently selected into a ComboBox widget so that they can be quickly
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								selected again.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{ExFileSelectBox}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{ExFileSelectBox}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixExFileSelectBox.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget is usually embedded in a tixExFileSelectDialog widget. It
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								provides an convenient method for the user to select files. The style
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								of the \class{ExFileSelectBox} widget is very similar to the standard
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								file dialog on MS Windows 3.1.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\ulink{ExFileSelectDialog}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/EFileDlg.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{FileSelectBox}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{FileSelectBox}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixFileSelectBox.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is similar to the standard Motif(TM) file-selection box. It is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								generally used for the user to choose a file. FileSelectBox stores the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								files mostly recently selected into a \class{ComboBox} widget so that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								they can be quickly selected again.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{FileSelectDialog}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/FileDlg.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{FileEntry}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{FileEntry}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixFileEntry.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget can be used to input a filename. The user can type in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								filename manually. Alternatively, the user can press the button widget
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								that sits next to the entry, which will bring up a file selection
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								dialog.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{FileEntry}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/FileEnt.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Hierachical ListBox}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{HList}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{HList}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixHList.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget can be used to display any data that have a hierarchical
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								structure, for example, file system directory trees. The list entries
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								are indented and connected by branch lines according to their places
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								in the hierachy.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{HList}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/HList1.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{CheckList}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{CheckList}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixCheckList.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget displays a list of items to be selected by the user. CheckList
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								acts similarly to the Tk checkbutton or radiobutton widgets, except it
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is capable of handling many more items than checkbuttons or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								radiobuttons.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ CheckList}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/ChkList.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ScrolledHList (1)}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/SHList.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ScrolledHList (2)}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/SHList2.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{Tree}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{Tree}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixTree.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget can be used to display hierachical data in a tree form. The
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								user can adjust the view of the tree by opening or closing parts of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the tree.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Tree}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/Tree.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Tree (Dynamic)}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/DynTree.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Tabular ListBox}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{TList}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{TList}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixTList.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget can be used to display data in a tabular format. The list
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								entries of a \class{TList} widget are similar to the entries in the Tk
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								listbox widget.  The main differences are (1) the \class{TList} widget
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								can display the list entries in a two dimensional format and (2) you
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								can use graphical images as well as multiple colors and fonts for the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								list entries.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ScrolledTList (1)}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/STList1.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ScrolledTList (2)}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/STList2.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Grid has yet to be added to Python
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \subsubsection{Grid Widget}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Simple Grid}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/SGrid0.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ScrolledGrid}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/SGrid1.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Editable Grid}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/EditGrid.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Manager Widgets}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{PanedWindow}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{PanedWindow}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixPanedWindow.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget allows the user to interactively manipulate the sizes of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								several panes.  The panes can be arranged either vertically or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								horizontally.  The user changes the sizes of the panes by dragging the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								resize handle between two panes.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{PanedWindow}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/PanedWin.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{ListNoteBook}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{ListNoteBook}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixListNoteBook.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget is very similar to the \class{TixNoteBook} widget: it can be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								used to display many windows in a limited space using a notebook
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								metaphor. The notebook is divided into a stack of pages (windows). At
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								one time only one of these pages can be shown. The user can navigate
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								through these pages by choosing the name of the desired page in the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\member{hlist} subwidget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ListNoteBook}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/ListNBK.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{NoteBook}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{NoteBook}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixNoteBook.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widget can be used to display many windows in a limited space using a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								notebook metaphor. The notebook is divided into a stack of pages. At
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								one time only one of these pages can be shown. The user can navigate
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								through these pages by choosing the visual ``tabs'' at the top of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								NoteBook widget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{NoteBook}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/NoteBook.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \subsubsection{Scrolled Widgets}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ScrolledListBox}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/SListBox.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ScrolledText}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/SText.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{ScrolledWindow}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/SWindow.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Canvas Object View}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/CObjView.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Image Types}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \refmodule{Tix} module adds:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\ulink{pixmap}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/pixmap.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								capabilities to all \refmodule{Tix} and \refmodule{Tkinter} widgets to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								create color images from XPM files.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-13 04:25:37 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{XPM Image In Button}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/Xpm.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-13 04:25:37 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{XPM Image In Menu}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/Xpm1.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\ulink{Compound}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/compound.html}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								image types can be used to create images that consists of multiple
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								horizontal lines; each line is composed of a series of items (texts,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bitmaps, images or spaces) arranged from left to right. For example, a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								compound image can be used to display a bitmap and a text string
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								simutaneously in a Tk \class{Button} widget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Compound Image In Buttons}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/CmpImg.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Compound Image In NoteBook}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/CmpImg2.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Compound Image Notebook Color Tabs}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/CmpImg4.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% Python Demo of:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% \ulink{Compound Image Icons}{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/demos/samples/CmpImg3.tcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Miscellaneous Widgets}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{InputOnly}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{InputOnly}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixInputOnly.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widgets are to accept inputs from the user, which can be done with the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{bind} command (\UNIX{} only).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Form Geometry Manager}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								In addition, \refmodule{Tix} augments \refmodule{Tkinter} by providing:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{Form}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{Form}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tixForm.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								geometry manager based on attachment rules for all Tk widgets.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%begin{latexonly}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\subsection{Tix Class Structure}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\begin{figure}[hbtp]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\centerline{\epsfig{file=hierarchy.png,width=.9\textwidth}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\vspace{.5cm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\caption{The Class Hierarchy of Tix Widgets}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\end{figure}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%end{latexonly}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-29 21:09:08 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Tix Commands}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{classdesc}{tixCommand}{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \ulink{tix commands}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://tix.sourceforge.net/dist/current/man/html/TixCmd/tix.htm}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								provide access to miscellaneous elements of \refmodule{Tix}'s internal
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								state and the  \refmodule{Tix} application context.  Most of the information
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								manipulated by these methods pertains to the application as a whole,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								or to a screen or display, rather than to a particular window.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								To view the current settings, the common usage is:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								import Tix
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								root = Tix.Tk()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								print root.tix_configure()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{classdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{methoddesc}{tix_configure}{\optional{cnf,} **kw}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Query or modify the configuration options of the Tix application
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								context. If no option is specified, returns a dictionary all of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								available options.  If option is specified with no value, then the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								method returns a list describing the one named option (this list will
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								option is specified).  If one or more option-value pairs are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								specified, then the method modifies the given option(s) to have the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								given value(s); in this case the method returns an empty string.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Option may be any of the configuration options.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{methoddesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{methoddesc}{tix_cget}{option}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\var{option}. Option may be any of the configuration options.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{methoddesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{methoddesc}{tix_getbitmap}{name}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Locates a bitmap file of the name \code{name.xpm} or \code{name} in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								one of the bitmap directories (see the \method{tix_addbitmapdir()}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								method).  By using \method{tix_getbitmap()}, you can avoid hard
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								coding the pathnames of the bitmap files in your application. When
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								successful, it returns the complete pathname of the bitmap file,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								prefixed with the character \samp{@}.  The returned value can be used to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								configure the \code{bitmap} option of the Tk and Tix widgets.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{methoddesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{methoddesc}{tix_addbitmapdir}{directory}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tix maintains a list of directories under which the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\method{tix_getimage()} and \method{tix_getbitmap()} methods will
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								search for image files.  The standard bitmap directory is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\file{\$TIX_LIBRARY/bitmaps}. The \method{tix_addbitmapdir()} method
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								adds \var{directory} into this list. By using this method, the image
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								files of an applications can also be located using the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\method{tix_getimage()} or \method{tix_getbitmap()} method.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{methoddesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{methoddesc}{tix_filedialog}{\optional{dlgclass}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Returns the file selection dialog that may be shared among different
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								calls from this application.  This method will create a file selection
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								dialog widget when it is called the first time. This dialog will be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								returned by all subsequent calls to \method{tix_filedialog()}.  An
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								optional dlgclass parameter can be passed as a string to specified
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								what type of file selection dialog widget is desired.  Possible
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								options are \code{tix}, \code{FileSelectDialog} or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\code{tixExFileSelectDialog}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{methoddesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{methoddesc}{tix_getimage}{self, name}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Locates an image file of the name \file{name.xpm}, \file{name.xbm} or
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\file{name.ppm} in one of the bitmap directories (see the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\method{tix_addbitmapdir()} method above). If more than one file with
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the same name (but different extensions) exist, then the image type is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								chosen according to the depth of the X display: xbm images are chosen
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								on monochrome displays and color images are chosen on color
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								displays. By using \method{tix_getimage()}, you can avoid hard coding
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the pathnames of the image files in your application. When successful,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								this method returns the name of the newly created image, which can be
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								used to configure the \code{image} option of the Tk and Tix widgets.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{methoddesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{methoddesc}{tix_option_get}{name}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Gets the options manitained by the Tix scheme mechanism.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{methoddesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{methoddesc}{tix_resetoptions}{newScheme, newFontSet\optional{,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                     newScmPrio}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Resets the scheme and fontset of the Tix application to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\var{newScheme} and \var{newFontSet}, respectively.  This affects only
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								those widgets created after this call.  Therefore, it is best to call
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the resetoptions method before the creation of any widgets in a Tix
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								application.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The optional parameter \var{newScmPrio} can be given to reset the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								priority level of the Tk options set by the Tix schemes.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Because of the way Tk handles the X option database, after Tix has
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								been has imported and inited, it is not possible to reset the color
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								schemes and font sets using the \method{tix_config()} method.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Instead, the \method{tix_resetoptions()} method must be used.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{methoddesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-03 21:18:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{\module{ScrolledText} ---
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         Scrolled Text Widget}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\declaremodule{standard}{ScrolledText}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								   \platform{Tk}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\modulesynopsis{Text widget with a vertical scroll bar.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\sectionauthor{Fred L. Drake, Jr.}{fdrake@acm.org}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The \module{ScrolledText} module provides a class of the same name
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								which implements a basic text widget which has a vertical scroll bar
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								configured to do the ``right thing.''  Using the \class{ScrolledText}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								class is a lot easier than setting up a text widget and scroll bar
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								directly.  The constructor is the same as that of the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\class{Tkinter.Text} class.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The text widget and scrollbar are packed together in a \class{Frame},
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-13 04:25:37 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								and the methods of the \class{Grid} and \class{Pack} geometry managers
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								are acquired from the \class{Frame} object.  This allows the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\class{ScrolledText} widget to be used directly to achieve most normal
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								geometry management behavior.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-12-03 21:18:30 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Should more specific control be necessary, the following attributes
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								are available:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{memberdesc}[ScrolledText]{frame}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The frame which surrounds the text and scroll bar widgets.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{memberdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{memberdesc}[ScrolledText]{vbar}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The scroll bar widget.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{memberdesc}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\input{libturtle}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Idle \label{idle}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\declaremodule{standard}{idle}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								%\modulesynopsis{A Python Integrated Developement Environment}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\moduleauthor{Guido van Rossum}{guido@Python.org}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Idle is the Python IDE built with the \refmodule{Tkinter} GUI toolkit.  
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Idle}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Python Editor}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Integrated Developement Environment}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								IDLE has the following features:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   coded in 100\% pure Python, using the \refmodule{Tkinter} GUI toolkit
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   cross-platform: works on Windows and \UNIX{} (on Mac OS, there are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								currently problems with Tcl/Tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   multi-window text editor with multiple undo, Python colorizing
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								and many other features, e.g. smart indent and call tips
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Python shell window (a.k.a. interactive interpreter)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   debugger (not complete, but you can set breakpoints, view  and step)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Menus}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{File menu}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[New window]     create a new editing window
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Open...]        open an existing file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Open module...] open an existing module (searches sys.path)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Class browser]  show classes and methods in current file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Path browser]   show sys.path directories, modules, classes and methods
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Class browser}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Path browser}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Save]   save current window to the associated file (unsaved
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								windows have a * before and after the window title)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Save As...]     save current window to new file, which becomes
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								the associated file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Save Copy As...]        save current window to different file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								without changing the associated file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Close]  close current window (asks to save if unsaved)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Exit]   close all windows and quit IDLE (asks to save if unsaved)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Edit menu}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Undo]   Undo last change to current window (max 1000 changes)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Redo]   Redo last undone change to current window
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Cut]    Copy selection into system-wide clipboard; then delete selection
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Copy]   Copy selection into system-wide clipboard
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Paste]  Insert system-wide clipboard into window
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Select All]     Select the entire contents of the edit buffer
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Find...]        Open a search dialog box with many options
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Find again]     Repeat last search
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Find selection] Search for the string in the selection
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Find in Files...]       Open a search dialog box for searching files
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Replace...]     Open a search-and-replace dialog box
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Go to line]     Ask for a line number and show that line
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Indent region]  Shift selected lines right 4 spaces
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Dedent region]  Shift selected lines left 4 spaces
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Comment out region]     Insert \#\# in front of selected lines
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Uncomment region]       Remove leading \# or \#\# from selected lines
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Tabify region]  Turns \emph{leading} stretches of spaces into tabs
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Untabify region]        Turn \emph{all} tabs into the right number of spaces
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Expand word]    Expand the word you have typed to match another
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                word in the same buffer; repeat to get a different expansion
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Format Paragraph]       Reformat the current blank-line-separated paragraph
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Import module]  Import or reload the current module
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Run script]     Execute the current file in the __main__ namespace
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Import module}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{Run script}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Windows menu}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Zoom Height]    toggles the window between normal size (24x80)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        and maximum height.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The rest of this menu lists the names of all open windows; select one
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to bring it to the foreground (deiconifying it if necessary).
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Debug menu (in the Python Shell window only)}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Go to file/line]        look around the insert point for a filename
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                and linenumber, open the file, and show the line.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Open stack viewer]      show the stack traceback of the last exception
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Debugger toggle]        Run commands in the shell under the debugger
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[JIT Stack viewer toggle]        Open stack viewer on traceback
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{stack viewer}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{debugger}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Basic editing and navigation}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{Backspace} deletes to the left; \kbd{Del} deletes to the right
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Arrow keys and \kbd{Page Up}/\kbd{Page Down} to move around
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{Home}/\kbd{End} go to begin/end of line
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{C-Home}/\kbd{C-End} go to begin/end of file
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Some \program{Emacs} bindings may also work, including \kbd{C-B},
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \kbd{C-P}, \kbd{C-A}, \kbd{C-E}, \kbd{C-D}, \kbd{C-L}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Automatic indentation}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								After a block-opening statement, the next line is indented by 4 spaces
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(in the Python Shell window by one tab).  After certain keywords
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								(break, return etc.) the next line is dedented.  In leading
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								indentation, \kbd{Backspace} deletes up to 4 spaces if they are there.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\kbd{Tab} inserts 1-4 spaces (in the Python Shell window one tab).
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								See also the indent/dedent region commands in the edit menu.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Python Shell window}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{C-C} interrupts executing command
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{C-D} sends end-of-file; closes window if typed at
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								a \samp{>>>~} prompt
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{Alt-p} retrieves previous command matching what you have typed
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{Alt-n} retrieves next
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{Return} while on any previous command retrieves that command
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   \kbd{Alt-/} (Expand word) is also useful here
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-15 17:22:04 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{itemize}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\index{indentation}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsection{Syntax colors}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The coloring is applied in a background ``thread,'' so you may
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								occasionally see uncolorized text.  To change the color
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								scheme, edit the \code{[Colors]} section in \file{config.txt}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Python syntax colors:]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Keywords]       orange
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Strings ]       green
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Comments]       red
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Definitions]    blue
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Shell colors:]
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[Console output] brown
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[stdout]         blue
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[stderr]       dark green
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item[stdin]       black
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{description}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\subsubsection{Command line usage}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								idle.py [-c command] [-d] [-e] [-s] [-t title] [arg] ...
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								-c command  run this command
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								-d          enable debugger
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								-e          edit mode; arguments are files to be edited
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								-s          run $IDLESTARTUP or $PYTHONSTARTUP first
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								-t title    set title of shell window
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{verbatim}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								If there are arguments:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{enumerate}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   If \programopt{-e} is used, arguments are files opened for
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        editing and \code{sys.argv} reflects the arguments passed to
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        IDLE itself.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Otherwise, if \programopt{-c} is used, all arguments are
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        placed in \code{sys.argv[1:...]}, with \code{sys.argv[0]} set
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        to \code{'-c'}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\item   Otherwise, if neither \programopt{-e} nor \programopt{-c} is
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        used, the first argument is a script which is executed with
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        the remaining arguments in \code{sys.argv[1:...]}  and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \code{sys.argv[0]} set to the script name.  If the script name
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        is '-', no script is executed but an interactive Python
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        session is started; the arguments are still available in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        \code{sys.argv}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{enumerate}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\section{Other Graphical User Interface Packages
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								         \label{other-gui-packages}}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								There are an number of extension widget sets to \refmodule{Tkinter}.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:17:24 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{seealso*}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://pmw.sourceforge.net/]{Python megawidgets}{is a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								toolkit for building high-level compound widgets in Python using the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\refmodule{Tkinter} module.  It consists of a set of base classes and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								a library of flexible and extensible megawidgets built on this
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								foundation. These megawidgets include notebooks, comboboxes, selection
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widgets, paned widgets, scrolled widgets, dialog windows, etc.  Also,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								with the Pmw.Blt interface to BLT, the busy, graph, stripchart, tabset
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								and vector commands are be available.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								The initial ideas for Pmw were taken from the Tk \code{itcl}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								extensions \code{[incr Tk]} by Michael McLennan and \code{[incr
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Widgets]} by Mark Ulferts. Several of the megawidgets are direct
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								translations from the itcl to Python. It offers most of the range of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widgets that \code{[incr Widgets]} does, and is almost as complete as
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tix, lacking however Tix's fast \class{HList} widget for drawing trees.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2003-07-08 13:44:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://tkinter.effbot.org/]{Tkinter3000 Widget Construction
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								          Kit (WCK)}{%
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is a library that allows you to write new Tkinter widgets in pure
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Python.  The WCK framework gives you full control over widget
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								creation, configuration, screen appearance, and event handling.  WCK
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widgets can be very fast and light-weight, since they can operate
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								directly on Python data structures, without having to transfer data
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								through the Tk/Tcl layer.}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:17:24 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{seealso*}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 06:02:55 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk is not the only GUI for Python, but is however the
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								most commonly used one.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:17:24 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\begin{seealso*}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.wxwindows.org]{wxWindows}{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is a GUI toolkit that combines the most attractive attributes of Qt,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Tk, Motif, and GTK+ in one powerful and efficient package. It is
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-28 07:26:15 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								implemented in \Cpp. wxWindows supports two flavors of \UNIX{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								implementation: GTK+ and Motif, and under Windows, it has a standard
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Microsoft Foundation Classes (MFC) appearance, because it uses Win32
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								widgets.  There is a Python class wrapper, independent of Tkinter.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								wxWindows is much richer in widgets than \refmodule{Tkinter}, with its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								help system, sophisticated HTML and image viewers, and other
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								specialized widgets, extensive documentation, and printing capabilities.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-05-31 18:21:56 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[]{PyQt}{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								PyQt is a \program{sip}-wrapped binding to the Qt toolkit.  Qt is an
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								extensive \Cpp{} GUI toolkit that is available for \UNIX, Windows and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Mac OS X.  \program{sip} is a tool for generating bindings for \Cpp{}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								libraries as Python classes, and is specifically designed for Python.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								An online manual is available at
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\url{http://www.opendocspublishing.com/pyqt/} (errata are located at
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\url{http://www.valdyas.org/python/book.html}). 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/pykde/index.php]{PyKDE}{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								PyKDE is a \program{sip}-wrapped interface to the KDE desktop
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								libraries.  KDE is a desktop environment for \UNIX{} computers; the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								graphical components are based on Qt.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://fxpy.sourceforge.net/]{FXPy}{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is a Python extension module which provides an interface to the 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\citetitle[http://www.cfdrc.com/FOX/fox.html]{FOX} GUI.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								FOX is a \Cpp{} based Toolkit for developing Graphical User Interfaces
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								easily and effectively. It offers a wide, and growing, collection of
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Controls, and provides state of the art facilities such as drag and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								drop, selection, as well as OpenGL widgets for 3D graphical
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								manipulation.  FOX also implements icons, images, and user-convenience
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								features such as status line help, and tooltips.  
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Even though FOX offers a large collection of controls already, FOX
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								leverages \Cpp{} to allow programmers to easily build additional Controls
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								and GUI elements, simply by taking existing controls, and creating a
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								derived class which simply adds or redefines the desired behavior.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2003-07-28 14:39:13 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\seetitle[http://www.daa.com.au/\textasciitilde james/software/pygtk/]{PyGTK}{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is a set of bindings for the \ulink{GTK}{http://www.gtk.org/} widget set.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								It provides an object oriented interface that is slightly higher
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								level than the C one. It automatically does all the type casting and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								reference counting that you would have to do normally with the C
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-10-12 15:02:46 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								API. There are also
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\ulink{bindings}{http://www.daa.com.au/\textasciitilde james/gnome/}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								to  \ulink{GNOME}{http://www.gnome.org}, and a 
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\ulink{tutorial}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2002-10-12 15:02:46 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{http://laguna.fmedic.unam.mx/\textasciitilde daniel/pygtutorial/pygtutorial/index.html}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								is available.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-30 18:17:24 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								\end{seealso*}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2001-11-16 01:05:27 +00:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								% XXX Reference URLs that compare the different UI packages
							 |